Specifications | Ford 2008 E-150 Automobile User Manual

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
12
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
12
17
Entertainment Systems
19
AM/FM stereo
AM/FM stereo with single CD
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD
Climate Controls
Heater only
Manual heating and air conditioning
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
19
21
25
31
31
32
34
34
39
40
46
46
47
51
52
54
Locks and Security
57
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
57
57
66
1
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing
Driving
Starting
Brakes
Traction Control™
Traction Control™/AdvanceTrac威
Transmission operation
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
Cleaning
Underbody preservation
2
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
69
69
76
86
95
112
115
116
132
144
150
160
161
161
165
167
168
174
186
186
188
188
190
198
206
207
213
214
220
221
222
227
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
229
231
233
236
238
244
261
263
264
268
Accessories
272
Index
274
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2007 Ford Motor Company
3
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
5
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
6
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Modification Data Recording
Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage; refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle
limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle’s Warranty
Guide for more information. Some vehicles are equipped with
Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about
vehicle modifications that increase horsepower and torque output; this
information cannot be erased and will stay in the system’s memory even
if the modification is removed. When a dealer or repair facility works on
your vehicle, it may be necessary for them to access the information in
the Powertrain Control System. This information will likely identify if any
unauthorized modifications have been made to the system and may be
used to determine if repairs will be covered by warranty.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to
follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal
injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles
Read the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation
and maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
7
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the
driver’s side door pillar or on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. You
can determine whether the
ambulance manufacturer followed
Ford’s recommendations by directly
contacting that manufacturer. Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package is
only available on certain 6.0L Diesel
engine equipped vehicles.
Using your vehicle as a stationary power source (PTO)
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for
operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take-off system.
8
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Export unique (Non–United States/Canada) vehicle specific
information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may be supplied
that complements this book. By referring to the market unique
supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
9
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
10
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
11
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, it has a unique cluster,
refer to Starting the engine in your 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct
Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service
engine soon⬙ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
12
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Electronic throttle control:
Illuminates when the engine has
defaulted to a “limp-home”
operation. Report the fault to a
dealer at the earliest opportunity.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
Engine Soon warning light to come
on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the
brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended distances with
the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
13
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to ON, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound
when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and safety restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature:
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Stop the
vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
14
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Low tire pressure warning (if
equipped): Illuminates when your
tire pressure is low. If the light
remains ON at start up or while
driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will
illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does
not turn ON or begins to flash, have the system inspected by your
authorized dealer. For more information on this system, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
AdvanceTrac威 (if equipped):
Flashes (two times per second)
when the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
system is active. If the light remains
on, or ⬙SERVICE RSC NOW⬙ is
displayed in the odometer display
with a chime, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized
dealer. (Flashes one time every two seconds when AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC system has not yet initialized and is not available.) For further
information, refer to AdvanceTrac威 with RSC stability enhancement
system in the Driving chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
system, then it was designed to be operated with RSC. Driving
without a functioning RSC™ system could be dangerous. Reduce speed
and proceed to an authorized dealer to have the system serviced
immediately.
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(automatic transmission):
Illuminates when the Tow/Haul
feature has been activated. Refer to
the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation. If the light
flashes steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the
transmission could occur.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
15
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Overdrive off: Illuminates when
O/D
the overdrive function of the
OFF
transmission has been turned off,
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light does not illuminate, have the transmission serviced soon, or damage
may occur.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
16
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
17
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press the SELECT/RESET control
once to switch from the odometer to
the trip odometer. Press the control again to select Trip A and Trip B
features. To reset the trip, press and hold the control again until the trip
reading is 0.0 miles.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates
the battery voltage when the ignition
is in the ON position. If the pointer
moves and stays outside the normal
operating range, have the vehicle’s
electrical system checked by your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
H
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
L
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
18
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo (if equipped)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
/
to find the
1. Seek: Press
next listenable station down/up the
frequency band.
/
to manually
2. Tune: Press
adjust the radio frequency down/up.
19
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode.
AM/FM
4. Memory preset buttons: To set
1
2
a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
5. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
6. Tone: Press TONE until the
desired level — Bass, Treble, Fade
appears on the display. Turn the
volume control to raise/lower the
levels, or to move the audio sound
from the right to left or the front to
back (if equipped).
7. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,
press and hold CLK until CLOCK
SET appears in the display.
Continue to hold CLK as you press
or
SEEK to decrease
increase
the hours.
3
4
VOL
PUSH
ON
TONE
CLK
To set the minute, press and hold CLK until CLOCK set appears in the
or
display. Continue to hold CLK as you press TUNE to decrease
the minutes.
increase
20
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo In-Dash Single CD/MP3 Radio
(if equipped)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
1. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station or track.
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album
text (AL) may be viewed while
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the
message display, its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text
fields. The display will scroll through all of the text in the current field
before changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3 seconds
of the previous press to proceed to the next/last text display. The last text
field shown on the display will become the new display message default.
21
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions
are included with the dealer installed kit.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
3. AUX: This function is not
operational.
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to
playing media.
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance, Fade and other menu
selections.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to
access/adjust the following
functions:
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL
to toggle ON/OFF. Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations
without losing your original manually set preset stations for
AM/FM1/FM2. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station
22
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong
stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT
) or decrease
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
(
Folder/Track mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are
accessible) MODE.
10. REPEAT: Repeats the current
CD/MP3 track when active (ON).
Press to show repeat status. Press
again to toggle status.
11. SHUFFLE: Plays CD/MP3
tracks in random order when active
(ON). Press to show shuffle status.
Press again to toggle status.
: Press to access
12. FOLDER
the next MP3 directory.
: Press to access
13. FOLDER
the previous MP3 directory.
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
17. BAND: Press to toggle between
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
23
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
18. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band; tune
to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
19. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
20. CD: Press to enter CD mode.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your authorized dealer for further information.
21. COMP(Compression): Brings
soft and loud CD passages together
for a more consistent listening level
when in CD mode. Press COMP to turn the feature ON/OFF.
22. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a
brief sampling of radio stations or
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.
or
to
23. CAT/Tune: Press
manually tune down/up the radio
frequency band.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
24
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
24. CD slot: Insert a CD with the label side up.
Premium Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo In-Dash Six CD/MP3
Radio (if equipped)
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
1. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station or track.
25
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album
text (AL) may be viewed while
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the
message display, its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text
fields. The display will scroll all of the text in the current field before
changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3 seconds of
the previous button press to proceed to the next/last text display.)
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions
are included with the dealer installed kit. Check with your authorized
dealer for availability.
3. AUX: Press to toggle between the
current playing media and DVD (if
equipped).
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to
playing media
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD. Press EJ
and a memory preset to eject a
specific disc. Press and hold to eject
all loaded discs.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance, Fade and other menu
functions.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
left/right speakers.
26
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Fade: Press FADE; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press to access the
following functions:
Compression: Brings soft and loud
CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU until
compression status is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the
compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed. Press the SEL
control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed.
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL
to toggle ON/OFF. Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations
without losing your original manually set preset stations for
AM/FM1/FM2. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station
stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong
stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT
) or decrease
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
(
Folder/Track Mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are
accessible) MODE.
10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track. Press again
to disable.
11. SHUFFLE: Press play the
CD/MP3 tracks on the current disc
in random order. Press again to
disable.
: Press to access
12. FOLDER
the next MP3 directory.
FOLDER: Press to access
13.
the previous MP3 directory
27
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Check with your
authorized dealer for availability.
17. BAND: Press to toggle between
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
18. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency, tune to a
station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
19. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
20. Load: Press to load a CD. Press
LOAD and a memory preset to load
to a specific disc slot. Press and
hold to load up to six discs.
21. CD: Press to enter CD mode.
28
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your authorized dealer for further information.
22. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a
brief sampling of radio stations or
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.
23. Disc/Tune: Press
or
to
manually tune down/up the radio
frequency band, or to listen to the
previous/next CD.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit
to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Check
with your authorized dealer for availability.
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
24. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side up.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches, moon roof (if equipped) and
audio system may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off or until any door is opened.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
29
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Dirty, warped or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
30
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
FLR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select MIX.
2. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to HI.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
31
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
NORM A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
FLR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
32
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select MIX.
2. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to HI.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear fan controls adjust the
volume of air circulated in the rear
of the vehicle.
33
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
• The first position turns on the
parking, tail, license plate and
side marker lamps.
• The outer position turns on the
headlamps.
Battery saver
The battery saver can be set to turn off the courtesy lamps within 2 or
10 minutes if a door is left open and the key is not in the ignition.
Demand (manually switched on) interior lamps can be set to turn off
within 2 or 30 minutes after the key has been removed from the ignition.
Note: The vehicle is factory set at 2 minutes to turn off demand and
courtesy lamps. The vehicle will change to 10 minutes for courtesy lamps
and 30 minutes for demand interior lamps once the odometer reads over
50 miles.
To change the battery saver duration time, do the following:
1. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do not start the vehicle.
2. After the odometer is displayed, press and release the reset button 10
times within 60 seconds.
3. The words ’Battery Saver’ will be displayed.
4. Press the reset button to select/toggle between ’2 minutes’ or ’30
minutes’ duration.
5. Once your time choice is displayed, wait until the odometer is
displayed (approximately 30 seconds).
The battery saver feature will now work with the new time duration.
Note: Even when choosing the 30 minute time duration, the courtesy
lamps can only have a maximum on time of 10 minutes. Only demand
interior lamps will stay on for the entire 30 minute period.
34
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
35
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
To adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel, rotate the dimmer
control clockwise/counterclockwise
when the headlamp control is in the
parking lamp or low-beam position.
To turn on the interior lamps, rotate
the dimmer control fully
counterclockwise past the detent.
The dome lamp will not illuminate if the control switch is not rotated
past the detent.
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AIM ADJUSTMENT (SEALED BEAM
HEADLAMPS)
The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using
mechanical aimers. If mechanical aimers are used and the cross-car sight
line is in any way blocked, set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the
same setting, such that the cross-car sight line is no longer blocked, per
the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used. You can also
aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away
from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at
night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
• (5) Center of headlamps
• (6) Center line of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is
marked either on the lens (a circle
or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or
feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the
ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the
wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape works well).
36
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the top
edge of the intensity zone even with
the horizontal reference line (4). If
the top edge of the high intensity
area is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to adjust
it.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster (1)
for each headlamp. Adjust the aim
by turning the adjuster control
either clockwise (to adjust up) or
counterclockwise (to adjust down).
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of vertical
lines (5) must be marked at the
center line of the headlamps on the
wall or screen.
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the
vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left
edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow
the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster (2) for each headlamp. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the high
intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp
under adjustment.
VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT (AERODYNAMIC HEADLAMPS)
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
37
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works
well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
the back of each headlamp, then use
a long Phillips #2 screwdriver to
turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise (to adjust down)
or clockwise (to adjust up) aligning
the upper edge of the light pattern
up to the horizontal line.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
38
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Cargo and dome lamps with rear headliner
Rear cargo lamps equipped with an
ON/OFF/DOOR control will light
when:
• doors are closed and the control
is in the ON position
• control is in the DOOR position
and any door is open
• headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you
open the doors or fully rotate the headlamp control.
Third row courtesy/reading/cargo lamps
The dome portion of the lamp, the
center light, can be turned on when
the headlamp control is rotated fully
counterclockwise or when any door
is opened.
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.
39
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Front and rear courtesy/reading
lamps
The dome portion of the lamp, the
center light, can be turned on when
the headlamp control is rotated fully
counterclockwise or when any door
is opened.
The reading lamp portion, the two outer lights, can only be toggled on
and off at the lamp.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Headlamps
(aerodynamic)
Headlamps (sealed
beam)
Park lamp with
aerodynamic
Park lamp with sealed
beam
Side marker with
aerodynamic
Number of
bulbs
2
Trade number
2
H6054
2
3157A or 3157AK
2
4157K or 3157K
2
168
40
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
H13/9008
Lights
Function
Number of
bulbs
2
Trade number
Side marker with
194
sealed beam
Back-up lamps
2
3156K or 3156
License plate lamp
1
168
Stop/tail/turn/side
2
3457K or 3357K
marker lamp
High-mount brakelamp
2
912
Cargo lamp
1
211-2
Dome lamp (standard)
1
912
Map/reading lamp
2
211-2
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position and open the hood.
2. Remove the three screws from
the top and bottom front of the
headlamp assembly and pull the
assembly straight out.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward and then pulling it
rearward.
41
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
4. Remove the bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
alcohol before being used.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing headlamp bulbs (sealed beam)
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position and open the hood.
2. Remove the four screws from the
top and bottom front of the
headlamp assembly and carefully
remove the lamp/bezel.
3. Remove the four screws and the
retaining ring.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb and remove
the bulb.
To install the new bulb, follow the
removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Remove headlamp assembly, refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs in
this section.
42
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Aerodynamic
Sealed beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing side marker bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Remove headlamp assembly, refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs in
this section.
Aerodynamic
43
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Sealed beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs
The interior cargo lamp (if equipped), on vehicles without a rear
headliner, will have to be removed from under the high-mount brakelamp
assembly located inside the vehicle. Then:
1. Remove the two screws from the
high-mount brakelamp assembly and
lift the lamp from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.
44
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Turn the headlamp switch to OFF
and then remove the two screws
and the license plate lamp assembly
from the rear door.
2. Remove bulb socket from lamp
assembly by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb out from socket and
push in the new bulb.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing stop/turn/tail/side marker/backup lamp bulbs
The stop/turn/tail/side marker/backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail
lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the
OFF position and then remove the
four screws and the lamp assembly
from vehicle.
2. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
To install the lamp, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
45
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
46
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
47
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the release on the door to
open the storage compartment.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped)
The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of
aftermarket garage door openers:
1. Place VELCRO威 hook onto side of
aftermarket transmitter opposite of
actuator control.
2. Place the transmitter into storage
compartment, control down.
3. Place the provided height
adaptors onto the back of the
GARAGE control as needed.
4. Press the GARAGE control to
activate the transmitter.
48
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Electronic compass/temperature display (if equipped)
Outside air temperature
The outside temperature display is
contained in the overhead console.
The temperature display can be
turned off and on by pressing the
SELECT control on the overhead
console. The temperature can be
displayed in Centigrade or
Fahrenheit by pressing the SELECT
73˚ NW
control.
If the outside temperature falls
below 38°F (3°C), the display will alternate from “ICE” to the outside
temperature at a two second rate for one minute.
Compass
The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle
heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass
accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration
of the compass.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in by referring to the zone
map.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON
position.
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
49
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Press and hold the SELECT
control until VAR appears in the
display, then release. The display
should show the current zone
number.
9
4. Press the SELECT control until
the desired zone number appears.
The display will flash and then
return to normal operation. The zone is now updated.
VAR
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open
area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines:
• Press and hold the SELECT
control until CAL appears in the
CAL
display (approximately eight
seconds) and release.
• Drive the vehicle slowly (less
than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until CAL indicator turns off in about
2–3 complete circles.
• The compass is now calibrated.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point (equipped
with a cover or a cap plug) is
located on the instrument panel.
A second power point (if equipped)
is located behind the driver’s seat on
the upper trim panel.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
50
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running (in a safe manner) to avoid unintentional discharge of the
battery. To prevent the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
51
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches and radio may be used for up
to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, or
until any door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
To adjust your mirrors:
to adjust the left
1. Select
to adjust the right
mirror or
mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
disable the adjust function.
Spotter mirror
Note: New spotter mirrors may be stiff, requiring several cycles before
the spotter adjustment effort eases.
52
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Spotter mirror on standard
mirror (if equipped)
The spotter mirror only can be tilted
from top to bottom. Move the lower
mirror manually up/down to increase
side and rear visibility. Apply
pressure only in the center of the
spotter mirror along the top or
bottom edges to adjust the tilt feature. Do not apply any force on the
left or right edges of the standard mirror spotter section, as this
may lead to a mirror fracture.
Spotter mirror on telescoping
mirror
The spotter mirror has a swivel that
allows it to tilt up and down, and
also to tilt left and right to increase
side and rear visibility.
Fold-away mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow
spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a
garage with the trailer tow mirror.
53
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The telescoping feature (if
equipped) allows the mirror to
extend approximately 3.15 inches
(80 mm). This feature is especially
useful to the driver when towing a
trailer.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET ACCEL control
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary
momentarily when driving up and
down a steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
54
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES (resume) control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET ACCEL
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the SET
ACCEL control to operate the
Tap-Up function. Press and
release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in increments by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the COAST
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the
COAST control to operate the
Tap-Down function. Press and
release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in increments by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
55
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET ACCEL control.
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the
speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
56
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an
emergency.
If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
system, your keys are electronically coded to your vehicle; using a
non-coded key will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your
dealer supplied keys, replacement keys are available through your
authorized dealer.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press U to unlock all doors and L to
lock all doors.
U
L
Memory lock
If you lock your doors with the power lock switch or the remote
transmitter while the sliding door is open, the door will automatically
lock after it is closed.
Autolock feature
Note: Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled.
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than 2 seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 4 (ON)
position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than 2 seconds.
57
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled; there are two
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer, or
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 3 (OFF) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 4 (ON)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
U
L
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 4 (ON)
position to the 3 (OFF) position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 4 (ON) position. The horn will chirp one
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
58
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Back cargo door lock (if equipped)
The passenger side rear cargo door
has a power door lock control
mounted on the inside of the door.
When this lock is pressed, all doors
will lock/unlock.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ (if equipped)
The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ insures that the cargo doors are
double locked for extra security.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ features
• The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ is available with either power
or manual door locks.
• The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ provides extra security via a
double-locked design.
• The cargo doors can only be unlocked from the outside by using the
keys.
• The power unlock feature (if equipped with power door locks) will
only unlock the front doors.
• The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ is equipped with an
emergency unlock handle installed in the door inner panel.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ procedure
For vehicles equipped with power door locks:
• Lock the vehicle with the key, manual door lock, key fob or use the
power door lock on the front door trim panel. The front doors are
locked and the cargo doors are double-locked.
• Unlock the vehicle with the key fob or use the power door lock on the
front door. The front doors are unlocked and the cargo doors remain
double-locked.
• The only way to unlock the side or back cargo doors from
outside vehicle is with the key.
59
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
For vehicles equipped with manual door locks:
• The front door locks can be locked by using either the key or the
manual door lock.
• In order to activate the E-Guard Cargo Protection System™, use the
key or the manual door lock to lock the side and back cargo doors.
• The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using the manual door
lock.
If equipped with E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ occupants
may become trapped in the cargo area unless the exit procedure
is followed. The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using manual or
power door locks or key fob. In an emergency, to exit the cargo area,
locate the emergency handle in the rear door or side door, pull the
emergency handle to unlock the door, then unlatch the door using the
inside release handle.
Emergency lock release
The emergency handle in the door trim panel unlocks the E-Guard Cargo
Protection System™.
The emergency handles are located in the following areas:
• The side door emergency handle
is located on the door inner trim
panel in the speaker cup.
60
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• The rear door handle is located in
the rear door below the glass.
To open the side or back cargo doors from the inside:
1. Unlock the E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ using the emergency
handle.
2. Unlatch the door using the inside release handle.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
61
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The remote entry system allows you
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key. Note:
• The lock and unlock features
work when the ignition is in any
position.
• The panic feature is active when
the ignition is in either the 1
(ACCESSORY), 2 (LOCK) or 3
(OFF) positions.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to
the off position.
and release again within three seconds to unlock the
2. Press
passenger doors and the rear cargo doors.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
One step door unlocking
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with the E-Guard Cargo Protection
System™ the remote transmitter Unlock command will only unlock the
front doors; the only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from
outside the vehicle is with the key.
and release
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press
once to unlock the passenger doors and the rear cargo doors. Note: The
interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry feature
later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to
the off position.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled. Unlocking can be
switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and
and
buttons simultaneously on the remote entry
holding both the
transmitter for approximately 4 seconds and release. The parklamps will
62
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step
unlocking. Repeat the procedure to switch back to two-step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors.
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
2. Press
the doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, and
the horn will chirp once.
Car finder
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
Press
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
to activate the alarm. Press the control again, or turn the
Press
ignition to the 1 (ACCESSORY) or 4 (ON) position to deactivate the
alarm.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 2
(LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
63
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure. If all remote entry transmitters
are not present during programming procedure, the ones missing during
programming will no longer operate the vehicle.
64
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not
4
depressed during this sequence.
3
To reprogram the remote entry
5
transmitters:
2
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Place the key in the ignition and
1
turn from the (2) LOCK position to
(3) OFF.
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the (3) OFF
position and (4) ON. Note: The eighth turn must end in the (4) ON
position.
4. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
5. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
6. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
7. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to program each additional remote entry
transmitter (up to four transmitters).
8. Turn the ignition to the (3) OFF position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
9. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 4 (ON) or 1 (ACCESSORY)
position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
65
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system
behave as follows:
• When the ignition is in the 2 (LOCK) position, the indicator will flash
once every 2 seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the
SecuriLock™ system is functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the
SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.
Vehicles without the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system behave as
follows:
• When the ignition is in the 2 (LOCK) position, the indicator will not
flash.
66
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• When the igniton is in the 4 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 2
(LOCK) position.
3
4
5
2
1
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock™ keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
67
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
1. Insert the first previously
4
programmed coded key into the
3
ignition and turn the ignition from
5
the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON)
position (maintain ignition in the 4
2
(ON) position for at least one
second, but no more than ten
seconds).
1
2. Turn ignition from the 4 (ON)
position back to the 3 (OFF)
position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition.
3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second
previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition
from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position (maintain ignition in
the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but no more than ten
seconds).
4. Turn the ignition from the 4 (ON) position back to the 3 (OFF)
position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position (maintain
ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second, but no more than
ten seconds). This step will program your new key to a coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
68
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
69
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Before returning the
seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or
any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After
returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of
a sudden stop or collision.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support control is
located on the inboard side of the
driver’s seat.
Turn the lumbar support control
clockwise to increase firmness.
Turn the lumbar support control
counterclockwise to increase
softness.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
70
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
REAR SEATS
Rear captains chair adjust — passenger side only
Pull the lever forward to adjust the
seat forward or backward.
71
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Quick release captains chair (7 passenger configuration second
row only)
To remove the seat:
1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt
from the seat by inserting a key or
small screwdriver into the slot in the
detachable anchor and lifting
upward.
2. Pull the seat latch handle, then
pull the seat toward the right side of
the vehicle to disengage four pins
from the floor mount.
3. Remove the seat.
To install the seat:
Check to see that the seat and seatback is latched securely in
position. Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor by
pushing/pulling on the seat. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
72
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the seat to the floor
mount.
2. Pull the seat latch handle downward to lock the seat in position.
3. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, then insert the safety belt
tongue into detachable anchor until you hear a “click” and feel the latch
engage.
Rear bench seat
To remove the seats:
1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt
from the seat by inserting a key or
small screwdriver into the slot in the
detachable anchor and lifting
upward (2nd row passenger side
only).
73
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Find the clips attached near the
ends of the lap/shoulder belts.
3. Clip the end of the belt to the
stationary portion of the shoulder
belt coming out of the trim panel.
The end of the shoulder belt must
be clipped in order to keep it from
striking anything during vehicle
operation.
74
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. With assistance, pull the LH/RH seat latch release straps (1) (located
behind the latch mechanisms) to release the latch from the rear strikers.
5. Lift the rear end of seat upward and rearward by pushing on the
seatback (2) and lifting the seat cushion (3) to disengage the front seat
hook and the rear seat latch from the striker.
6. With assistance, remove the seat assembly.
• To remove the 3rd, 4th, and 5th row seats (if equipped), repeat Steps
1 through 6.
To install the seat:
Ensure that the seat is installed or removed from the striker pins
with adequate ergonomic assistance. Due to the weight of the
seat, it must be handled by at least two adults during installation or
removal from the vehicle.
Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor by
pushing/pulling on the seat or seatback (2). If not latched, the
seat may cause injury during a sudden stop.
1. Please make sure the floor striker area is clean of any debris that
would prevent the seat from latching.
2. With assistance, position the seat in the vehicle.
3. Align the front hooks to the LH/RH front striker pins prior to lowering
the rear latch mechanism and aligning them with the rear striker pins.
4. Engage the front LH/RH hooks to the LH/RH front striker pins.
75
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. After the front LH/RH hooks are engaged to the LH/RH front striker
pins, pull LH/RH seat latch release straps to allow engagement of the
latch to the striker pins. Refer to the illustration in To remove the rear
seats above.
6. Pull/push seat back forward/backward to check for proper seat
installation.
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
Do not hang or attach any cargo to the release straps of the rear
bench seats. Doing so could cause the release straps to
inadvertently unlatch the rear bench seat. If not latched, the seat may
cause serious injury during a sudden stop.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
76
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
• Front and rear seats
2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
77
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Front and rear seats
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating position (if
equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be properly
restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints
for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
78
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all outboard
seating positions (except the driver position, which does not
have this feature) must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify
that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for
proper function.
79
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked
by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
The driver and front passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the
vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front
airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Front safety belt height adjustment
The front seat and outboard
positions are equipped with a height
adjuster. Adjust the height of the
shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. Release the button
and pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place. To adjust the belt upward,
slide the adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
80
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and the
warning chime will remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
81
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled approximately 5
seconds after the safety belt
warning light has turned off...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until safety belt is
buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
82
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
“I have an airbag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
People who are ejected are 40
times more likely to DIE. Safety
belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T
“PICK OUR CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system
One time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, the Belt-Minder威 will be disabled for that ignition
cycle only.
83
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
Read Steps 1 - 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The Belt-Minder威 feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• the ignition switch is in the OFF position
• all vehicle doors are closed
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• the parklamps/headlamps are in the OFF position
While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt-Minder威, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the
Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately 1
minute).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times,
ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for three seconds.
• Belt-Minder威 will automatically exit programming mode without
changing its enable status if Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds
of the end of Step 3.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
84
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
5. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 9 inch (23
cm) or 12 inch (31 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added
(part number 611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Use the shortest extender assembly that will provide adequate fit.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
85
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
86
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Never
place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must
transport a forward-facing child in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back and use appropriate restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your authorized
dealer.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
87
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains a
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the airbag sensors to close
an electrical circuit that initiates
airbag inflation. The fact that the
airbags did not inflate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not sufficient
enough to cause activation. Airbags
are designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
88
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder or sodium compounds which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. It is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• one or more impact and safing sensors
• a readiness light and tone
• a diagnostic module
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
89
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
90
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)
Note: The passenger airbag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped) may be on
vehicles with no rear seats and a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
greater than 8500. See Vehicle
loading – with and without a
trailer in the Tires, Wheels and
loading chapter.
An airbag ON/OFF switch
(if equipped) may have
been installed in this vehicle.
Before driving, always look at the
face of the switch to be sure the
switch is in the proper position in
accordance with these instructions
and warnings. Failure to put the
switch in a proper position can
increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision.
Turning the passenger airbag off
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold in
OFF position while removing the
key.
2. When the ignition is turned to the
ON position the OFF light
illuminates briefly, momentarily
shuts off and then turns back on.
This indicates that the passenger
airbag is deactivated.
If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch
is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.
91
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always
remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch.
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal
injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear facing infant
seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger
airbag is turned off.
Turning the passenger airbag back on
The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON.
2. The OFF light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to On. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is operational.
If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger airbag switch
is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger airbag switch serviced at an authorized dealer immediately.
The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the airbag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically designed to function together
with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your
airbag, you not only lose the protection of the airbag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was
designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a person who meets
the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation
criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision.
92
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use safety belts and
child restraints properly. DO NOT place a child in a rear facing infant
seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped with an airbag
ON/OFF switch and the passenger airbag is turned OFF. This is
because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag
and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is
substantial.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an
airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life
threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the
overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the airbags.
Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner’s Guide.
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
93
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a
crash.
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation
criteria.
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
94
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
• poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation
criteria.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lb.] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
95
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Ford recommends using child safety seats equipped with LATCH
attachments, attached to LATCH anchors and tether anchors. Some child
seat manufacturers sell LATCH accessory belts that attach child seats
that are not equipped with LATCH attachments onto LATCH anchors.
See Attaching safety seats with LATCH attachments for child seat
anchors in this section for seating positions with LATCH anchors.
If you install a forward-facing child safety seat using the vehicle safety
belts:
• use only seats equipped with lap-shoulder belts;
• Ford recommends placing forward-facing safety seats in the 2nd row
and using top tether straps for added protection.
For more information on top tether straps, see Attaching safety seats
with tether straps in this section.
Any booster seat that places the vehicle’s lap belt or shoulder belt
around a shield above and ahead of the child’s hips should not be used in
this vehicle.
Because the last row of seats in the 12 passenger and 15
passenger configuration is not equipped with LATCH anchors
and is spaced closer to the row of seats in front, Do not use
forward-facing or rear-facing child seats (other than belt-positioning
boosters) in the last row.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
96
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury in a crash.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
97
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
98
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
99
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• For the front passenger seat, place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and all rear seating positions) (if
equipped).
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
100
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
101
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
102
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
extracted.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
103
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Attaching safety seats with tether straps
Children should be placed in the rear in an appropriate child
safety seat that is properly secured to the vehicle.
When using forward-facing child safety seats in vehicles with
only two seating positions so the forward-facing child safety seat
cannot be placed in the rear of the vehicle, move the passenger seat as
far back from the instrument panel as possible.
Because the last row of seats in the 12 passenger and 15
passenger configuration is not equipped with LATCH anchors
and is spaced closer to the row of seats in front, Do not use
forward-facing or rear-facing child seats (other than belt-positioning
boosters) in the last row.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Front passenger seating position
The tether can be attached directly
to the rear of the front seat.
104
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat on
the front right-hand passenger seat.
2. Adjust the front right-hand
passenger seat full forward.
3. Route the child safety seat tether
strap over the back of the front
right-hand passenger seat as shown.
4. Clip the tether strap hook to the
seat pedestal to the location shown.
105
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. Adjust the front right hand
passenger seat to the full rearward
position.
6. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
7. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Second row bucket seats (Quads)
The tether strap can be attached
directly to the tether bracket under
the back edge of the seat cushion.
106
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat on
the second row left hand or right
hand bucket seat.
2. Route the child safety tether
strap over the back of the left hand
or right hand second row bucket
seat.
3. Clip the tether strap hook to the
seat pedestal at the location shown.
4. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Second, Third , Fourth, and Fifth row bench seats
For the center position of a
*
three-passenger bench seat, the
tether strap can be attached directly
to the tether bracket provided
under the back edge of the seat
*
cushion. For the outboard positions,
the tether strap can be attached to
the slot in the side of the seat pedestal.
*: Although tether slots are provided on the seat pedestals of the
four–passenger bench seat, use of child seats is not recommended for
these seating position locations.
1. For any three–passenger bench seat, place the child safety seat on the
left hand outboard position, the center position, or the right hand
outboard position as desired.
107
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Route the child safety tether
strap over the back of the bench
seat.
3. Clip the center tether strap hook
to the tether bracket mounted
under rear rail of seat cushion
frame. Clip the outboard tether
strap hooks to the tether bracket
slot provided on the left side of each
seat pedestal. The slot is located
between the two holes.
4. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
For additional important safety information on the proper use of safety
belts, child seats and infant seats, please read the entire Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter in this Owner’s Guide.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle may be equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat
installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol:
108
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Five passenger crew van
• Seven passenger wagon
• Eight passenger wagon
• Twelve passenger wagon
109
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Fifteen passenger wagon
represents LATCH anchors.
represents tether strap anchors.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the seat between the
cushion and seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
110
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
111
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
112
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
113
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
114
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
115
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower
than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust
if required. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
116
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
117
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see
Dissimilar Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description):
Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
118
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire inflation information
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.
WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect
persons and property.
119
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the illustration.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
120
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
121
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford Dealer.
Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
122
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (366 cm) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (366 cm) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (if equipped) are not
designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (if
equipped).
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged (if equipped).
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
123
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
124
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and
rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS (tire pressure
monitoring system), then the settings for the TPMS sensors need to be
updated. Always perform the TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation.
If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure in this
chapter.
125
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• DRW – Six tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set/pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
126
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
127
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
128
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
129
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
130
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
131
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
132
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
133
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
134
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Possible
Pressure Warning cause
Light
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
under-inflated
Spare tire in
use
TPMS
malfunction
Tire rotation
without sensor
training
Customer Action Required
1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly
inflated; refer to Inflating your
tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to
the manufacturer’s
recommended inflation pressure
as shown on the Tire Label
(located on the edge of driver’s
door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle
must be driven for at least two
minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light will turn OFF.
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
On vehicles with different front
and rear tire pressures, the
TPMS system must be retrained
following every tire rotation.
Refer to Tire rotation in this
chapter.
135
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Pressure Warning
Light
Flashing Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
of how the system functions
under these conditions, refer to
When your temporary spare
tire is installed in this section.
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, have the system
inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TPMS
malfunction
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6° C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
136
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
TPMS reset procedure (if applicable)
This procedure is only required after tire rotation on vehicles
with different front and rear tire pressures.
To determine if your vehicle requires two different pressures one for the front tires and one for the rear tires - refer to the
Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Vehicle Loading in
this chapter for more information.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some trucks require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) equipped on
this vehicle is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning
indicator at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for
the rear tires. Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent
performance and maximum tire life, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires
are on the front and which are on the rear. With this information, the
system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
Always perform the TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation. If
the system is not reset, it may not provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary.
137
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TPMS reset tool
A special TPMS reset tool has been provided with your vehicle to reset
your TPMS after tire rotation. The tool is located with your Owner’s
Guide materials.
Please take the tool with the
provided Velcro威 strip on the back
and mount it in the bottom right
corner of your Owner’s Guide case
(as shown) for safe keeping.
If you find that the reset tool was
not provided when delivered, has
been lost or no longer functions
(the battery is not replaceable),
please contact your authorized
dealer to obtain a replacement.
To verify that your TPMS reset tool is working, press and release the
button on the center of the TPMS tool. The red light should illuminate
and remain on for approximately five (5) seconds. If the light does not
illuminate, the tool needs to be replaced.
TPMS reset tips
To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, TPMS reset
should be performed at least three feet (one meter) away from another
Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset procedure at
same time.
Do not wait more than two (2) minutes between resetting each tire
sensor or the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have to
be repeated on all four wheels.
A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
TPMS reset procedure
Note: It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before
attempting.
Note: To enter the reset mode, Steps 1–5 MUST be completed within 60
seconds.
1. The key must be in the ignition and the ignition turned to OFF/LOCK.
Press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition from OFF/LOCK to RUN three (3) times ending in
the RUN position. DO NOT start the engine.
138
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
3. Press and hold the brake pedal for two (2) seconds, then release.
4. Turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK (DO NOT remove the key.)
5. Cycle the ignition from OFF/LOCK to RUN three (3) times ending in
RUN. DO NOT start the engine.
If reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound once,
the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center will display TRAIN
LF TIRE.
If after repeated attempts to enter reset mode, the horn does not sound,
the TPMS indicator does not flash and the message center does not
display TRAIN LF TIRE, seek service from your authorized dealer.
TPMS reset sequence
The TPMS system needs to be reset starting with the left front tire in
the following clockwise order:
1. Left front tire
2. Right front tire
3. Right rear tire
4. Left rear tire
139
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
1. Left front tire: Place the TPMS reset tool against the left front tire
where the tire meets the rim, opposite from the valve stem (1) as shown.
This is where the sensor is located inside the rim.
The tool needs to be held against the tire sidewall opposite the
valve stem as illustrated with the arrow on the tool pointing
towards the rim; do not use the tool with the arrow pointing away
from the rim as it may not activate the sensor.
2. Press and release the green button and hold the tool to the tire
sidewall until the horn sounds. The red light on the TPMS reset tool will
illuminate while the tool is active. The horn will sound once within 10
seconds to indicate the process was successful.
Note: If a double horn chirp is heard, repeat the procedure. If a single
horn chirp is not heard, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least a
1⁄4-turn and repeat the procedure. If the horn does not sound while
attempting to reset any wheel, seek service from your authorized dealer.
3. Perform Steps 1 and 2 on the right front, right rear and finally the left
rear tires.
Successful completion of the reset procedure can be verified by turning
the ignition to OFF without the horn sounding. If two short beeps are
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure two short beeps are heard when the key
is turned to OFF, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
140
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Rotation, pressure adjustment and TPMS reset example
The following example describes all the major steps involved in rotating
tires on a vehicle with different front and rear tire pressures. It
illustrates that the TPMS reset procedure needs to follow tire rotation
and pressure adjustment to avoid a possible false low tire warning.
Example:
A particular vehicle has the following recommended tire pressures: 50 psi
(345 kPa) front; 80 psi (552 kPa) rear.
Note: For your vehicle’s pressure, refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of your vehicle’s
driver’s door.
Before tire rotation
Sensor 1: 50 psi
Sensor 2: 50 psi
Sensor 3: 80 psi
Sensor 4: 80 psi
Tire rotation using the
recommended sequence (front
tires at top of diagram)
141
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Sensor position following tire
rotation
Sensor 1: 50 psi
Sensor 2: 50 psi
Sensor 3: 80 psi
Sensor 4: 80 psi
Pressure adjustment without the
required TPMS reset procedure
Sensor 1: 80 psi
Sensor 2: 80 psi
Sensor 3: 50 psi
Sensor 4: 50 psi
In this situation, the TPMS warning
light will come on.
If the TPMS reset procedure is not performed after tire rotation and air
pressure adjustment, the TPMS telltale may illuminate for a false low tire
pressure condition.
As in this example, the rear tires rotated to the front and properly
inflated to 50 psi (345 kPa) for the front axle would falsely illuminate the
low tire warning indicator as they are still trained for the rear positions
which require 80 psi (552 kPa).
142
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Rotation, pressure adjustment
and successful completion of the
TPMS reset procedure
Sensor 1: 80 psi
Sensor 2: 80 psi
Sensor 3: 50 psi
Sensor 4: 50 psi
Tire rotation and air pressure
adjustment followed by sensor
resetting will ensure the system is properly programmed for vehicles
with different front and rear tire pressures and reduce the risk of a false
low tire warning.
In this situation, the TPMS warning light will be off.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
143
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
144
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
145
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
146
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
147
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
148
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
149
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240
lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the
load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Refer to 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for Diesel engine towing information.
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer, provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
150
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Maximum
Maximum
Rear
Maximum
Loaded
frontal area of
Engine
axle
GCWR - lb.
Trailer Weight
trailer - ft2
ratio
(kg)
(m2)
- lb. (kg)
E-150 Regular/RV Van (8520 GVWR)
4.6L
3.73
11500 (5216) 6000 (2722)
60 (5.52)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 6500 (2948)
60 (5.52)
E-150 Van (Crew) (8520 GVWR)
4.6L
3.73
11500 (5216) 5800 (2404)
60 (5.52)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 6300 (2858)
60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular Wagon (7–passenger) (8520 GVWR)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 5900 (2676)
60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular Wagon (8–passenger) (8520 GVWR)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 6100 (2767)
60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular/RV Van (8600 GVWR)
5.4L
3.55
12000 (5443) 6500 (2948)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 7500 (3402)
60 (5.52)
E-150 Van (Crew) (8600 GVWR)
5.4L
3.55
12000 (5443) 6300 (2858)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 7300 (3311)
60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular Wagon (7–passenger) (8600 GVWR)
5.4L
3.55
12000 (5443) 5900 (2676)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 6900 (3130)
60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular Wagon (8–passenger) (8600 GVWR)
5.4L
3.55
12000 (5443) 6000 (2721)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 7000 (3175)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Regular/RV Van (8900 GVWR)
4.6L
3.73
11500 (5216) 6000 (2721)
60 (5.52)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 6500 (2948)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Regular Van (Crew) (8900 GVWR)
4.6L
3.73
11500 (5216) 5800 (2631)
60 (5.52)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 6300 (2853)
60 (5.52)
151
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Maximum
Maximum
Rear
Maximum
Loaded
frontal area of
Engine
axle
GCWR - lb.
Trailer Weight
trailer - ft2
ratio
(kg)
(m2)
- lb. (kg)
E-250 Extended/RV Van (8900 GVWR)
4.6L
3.73
11500 (5216) 5900 (2676)
60 (5.52)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 6400 (2903)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Extended Van (Crew) (8900 GVWR)
4.6L
3.73
11500 (5216) 5600 (2540)
60 (5.52)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 6100 (2769)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Regular/RV Van (9000 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5896) 7400 (3356)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Regular Van (Crew) (9000 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5896) 7200 (3266)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Extended/RV Van (9000 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5896) 7300 (3311)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Extended Van (Crew) (9000 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5896) 7100 (3220)
60 (5.52)
E-250 Cutaway (8600 GVWR)
4.6L
4.10
12000 (5443) 7500 (3402)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Regular/RV Van (9500 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 7400 (3356)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7400 (3356)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
3.73
15000 (6804) 9200 (4173)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Regular Van (Crew) (9500 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 7200 (3266)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7200 (3266)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
3.73
15000 (6804) 8900 (4037)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
152
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Maximum
Maximum
Rear
Maximum
Loaded
frontal area of
Engine
axle
GCWR - lb.
Trailer Weight
trailer - ft2
ratio
(kg)
(m2)
- lb. (kg)
E-350 Extended/RV Van (9500 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 7200 (3266)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7200 (3266)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
3.73
15000 (6804) 9000 (4082)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Van (Crew) (9500 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 7000 (3175)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7000 (3175)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
3.73
15000 (6804) 8800 (3992)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Regular Wagon (11–passenger) (8800 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 6700 (3039)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Regular Wagon (12–passenger) (8800 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 6700 (3039)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Wagon (11–passenger) (9300 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 6500 (2948)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Wagon (14/15–passenger) (9100 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 6400 (2903)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel) (9600
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8000 (3629)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(9600 GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
10600 (4808) 5700 (2585)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (10000
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7800 (3538)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
153
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Maximum
Maximum
Rear
Maximum
Loaded
frontal area of
Engine
axle
GCWR - lb.
Trailer Weight
trailer - ft2
ratio
(kg)
(m2)
- lb. (kg)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (10000
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7800 (3538)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (11500
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7800 (3538)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (11500
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7700 (3493)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (12500
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7800 (3538)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (10000
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7800 (3538)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (12500
GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 7800 (3538)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(9000 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 8600 (3901)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8600 (3901)
60 (5.52)
154
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Maximum
Maximum
Rear
Maximum
Loaded
frontal area of
Engine
axle
GCWR - lb.
Trailer Weight
trailer - ft2
ratio
(kg)
(m2)
- lb. (kg)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(9600 GVWR)
5.4L
3.73
13000 (5897) 8600 (3901)
60 (5.52)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8600 (3901)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8400 (3810)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(11500 GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8400 (3810)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8500 (3855)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(12500 GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8300 (3765)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8300 (3765)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(12500 GVWR)
5.4L
4.10
13000 (5897) 8300 (3765)
60 (5.52)
6.8L
4.10
18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
155
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Maximum
Maximum
Rear
Maximum
Loaded
frontal area of
Engine
axle
GCWR - lb.
Trailer Weight
trailer - ft2
ratio
(kg)
(m2)
- lb. (kg)
E-450 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (14050
GVWR)
5.4L
4.56
14050 (6373) 8500 (3855)
60 (5.52)
E-450 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (14050
GVWR)
5.4L
4.56
14050 (6373) 8400 (3810)
60 (5.52)
E-450 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (14500
GVWR)
6.8L
4.56
20000 (9072) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-450 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (14500
GVWR)
6.8L
4.56
20000 (9072) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14050 GVWR)
5.4L
4.56
14050 (6373) 9200 (4173)
60 (5.52)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14050 GVWR)
5.4L
4.56
14050 (6372) 9100 (4128)
60 (5.52)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14500 GVWR)
6.8L
4.56
20000 (9072) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14500 GVWR)
6.8L
4.56
20000 (9072) 10000 (4536)
60 (5.52)
Maximum trailer weight for all cutaway (E-350 and E-450) vehicles
must be calculated by subtracting the weight of the vehicle (including
incomplete vehicle weight and payload which includes second unit
body weight, cargo and passengers) from the GCW. Otherwise,
maximum trailer weight is 10,000 lb. (4536 kg).
156
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Maximum
Maximum
Rear
Maximum
Loaded
frontal area of
Engine
axle
GCWR - lb.
Trailer Weight
trailer - ft2
ratio
(kg)
(m2)
- lb. (kg)
For high altitude operation reduce GCWR by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300
meters) elevation.
To determine the maximum trailer weight designed for your particular
vehicle as equipped, follow the section Vehicle loading earlier in this
chapter.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Distribute the load so that only 10–15% of the total is on the tongue. Tie
down the load so that it does not shift and change the weight on the
hitch.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully after any towing operation.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use or install hitches that clamp onto the bumper or to the axle.
Underbody hitches are acceptable if installed properly.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
157
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5,000 lb. (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue weight
capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components, do not trailer
tow during the first 1,000 miles (1600 km) of a new vehicle.
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components during the first
500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing, drive no faster than 70 mph
(112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
158
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
When descending long, steep downhill grades, always use a lower gear to
provide engine braking to save wear on brakes. Use Drive (Overdrive
OFF) on moderately steep hills, Second (2) on steep hills, and First (1)
on very steep hills. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they
may overheat and become less effective.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 1,000 miles (1600 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) after changing
the rear axle lube.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place
the gearshift in P (Park) and increase idle speed. This aids engine
cooling and air conditioner efficiency.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
159
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle on a
trip behind a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need
for recreational towing of your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission
is not damaged.
2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions):
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral)
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h)
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed.
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified
technician at an authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
160
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
4
accessories such as the radio to
3
operate while the engine is not
5
running.
2. LOCK, locks the automatic
2
transmission gearshift lever and
allows key removal.
1
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all
accessories without locking the
steering wheel.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
161
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked. If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing
snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged
with snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a
significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and/or ice away from the air induction inlet.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
162
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
4
3
5
2
1
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
2. Turn the key to 5 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
4
3
5
2
1
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to 3 (OFF), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
163
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-17°C).
Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in
property damage or physical injury.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ⬙Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.⬙ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
164
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3
hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use
additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
165
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
!
P
BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
166
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), press
the parking brake pedal down until
the pedal stops.
To release, pull the lever (2).
Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate and will remain
illuminated until the parking brake
is released.
!
P
BRAKE
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
TRACTION CONTROL™ (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control™ system. This
system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle,
especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads
and gravel roads. The system will allow your vehicle to make better use
of available traction in these conditions.
During Traction Control™ operation,
the traction control active light will
illuminate and the engine will not
“rev-up” when you push further on
the accelerator. This is normal
system behavior and should be no
reason for concern.
167
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction Control™
event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you
experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
The Traction Control™ switch,
located on the center console, has
an indicator light that illuminates
when the system is off. The Traction
Control™ system will automatically
turn on every time the ignition is
turned off and on. The Traction
Control™ system should normally be left on.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the Traction Control™ system off. This may allow
excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful
“rocking” maneuver. Remember to switch the Traction Control™ system
back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck.
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate, the Traction Control™ button will not turn the system on or
off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system provides stability and traction
enhancement for certain driving situations when driver assistance is
needed. It helps your vehicle maintain traction, when driving on slippery
and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled by momentarily reducing engine
power and rapidly applying the anti-lock brakes. The system is a driver
aid which makes your vehicle easier to handle primarily on snow and
ice-covered roads.
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC button. This will allow your tires to “dig” for traction.
Remember to switch the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system back on once
the vehicle is no longer stuck.
168
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system is activated excessively in a short
period of time, the brake portion of the system will shut down to allow
the brakes to cool down. A limited AdvanceTrac威 with RSC function
using only engine power reduction will still help control the wheels from
over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the system will again
function normally. Anti-lock braking is not affected by this condition and
will function normally during the cool-down period.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system enhances your vehicle’s stability
during maneuvers that require all available tire traction, like in
wet/snowy/icy road conditions and/or when performing emergency
maneuvers. In an emergency lane-change, the driver will experience
better overall vehicle traction, and have better control of the vehicle.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system helps the driver maintain steering
control if the vehicle begins to slide excessively left or right or spin out.
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC will attempt to correct the sliding motion by
applying brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by reducing
engine power.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or death. The occurrence of a AdvanceTrac威 with RSC event is
an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability
to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Operating your
vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system disabled may severely
reduce your ability to control your vehicle. If you experience a severe
road event or any loss of vehicle control, SLOW DOWN.
Driving conditions which may activate AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
include:
• Taking a turn too fast.
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle.
• Hitting a patch of ice.
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road.
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa.
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa.
• Hitting a curb while turning.
• Driving on slick surfaces.
169
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.)
The RSC system works in conjunction with the AdvanceTrac威 system to
further enhance the vehicle’s overall stability during aggressive
maneuvers. The system helps maintain roll stability of the vehicle during
aggressive maneuvers by applying brake force to one or more wheels.
Driving conditions that may activate Roll Stability Control include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system automatically turns on when the
engine is started. However, the system does not function when the
vehicle is traveling in R (Reverse). In R (Reverse), ABS and the traction
enhancement feature will continue to function.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC button
allows the driver to control the
availability of the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC system. AdvanceTrac威
with RSC system status is indicated
by a warning indicator light with a
“sliding car” icon in the instrument
cluster that will flash when the
system is active and an indicator light in the control button that will
illuminate when the system is turned off.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
warning indicator light may flash to
indicate the system is not fully
initialized. If this happens, slow
down. If the light continues flashing,
have the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
system serviced by an authorized dealer.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system, the
warning indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on and the
instrument cluster will chime repeatedly. If the warning indicator light in
the instrument cluster remains on and the chime is active while the
engine is running, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
Pressing the control will disable the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system and
the traction enhancement feature at and below 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
170
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
vehicle is stuck in snow or mud or when driving in deep sand, switching
off the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system may be beneficial so the wheels
are allowed to spin. If your vehicle seems to lose engine power while
driving in deep sand or very deep snow and the vehicle speed is 20 mph
(32 km/h) or below, switching off the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC stability
enhancement feature will restore full engine power and will enhance
momentum through the obstacle. Remember to switch the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC system back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck.
Note: The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system will automatically restore to
full functionality every time the vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
or the ignition is turned off and back on. However, the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC button remains illuminated even above 20 mph (32 km/h) until
it is pressed.
Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC performs a system self-check. During
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC operation you may experience the following:
• A rumble or grinding noise
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• Steering feedback
• The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC indicator light will flash
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
operation.
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension, steering or
tires; the resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can
adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system. Also, do not
install a stereo loudspeaker. The speaker vibrations can adversely
affect the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC sensors.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(If the fluid level is below the FULL COLD range on the dipstick).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
171
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles
and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center
of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid
sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles.
Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
172
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload your vehicle
and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower speeds, avoiding
abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading or loading the
vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute
to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
Vehicle stability and handling
The risk of a rollover crash increases as the number of people and load
in the vehicle increase. This increased risk occurs because the passenger
weight and load raises the vehicle’s center of gravity and causes it to
shift rearward. As a result, the van has less resistance to rollover and
handles differently from other commonly driven passenger vehicles,
making it more difficult to control in an emergency situation. Placing any
load on the roof also raises the center of gravity and increases the
potential for rollover.
The van should be operated by an experienced driver. An organization that
owns a 15–passenger van should select one or two experienced drivers to
drive the van on a regular basis. These drivers will gain valuable experience
handling the van. This experience will help make each trip safer.
The van should be operated at a safe speed which, in some conditions,
may be less than the posted speed limit.
Further, all occupants should be properly restrained. Most people killed
in rollover crashes were unbelted. Occupants can dramatically reduce
their risk of being killed or seriously injured in a rollover crash by simply
using their seat belts. Organizations that own 15–passenger vans should
have a written seat belt use policy. Drivers should be responsible for
enforcing the policy.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
173
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift
to N (Neutral).
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
174
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
175
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The O/D OFF lamp will illuminate in
the instrument cluster.
O/D
ON/OFF
O/D
OFF
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
176
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to
(Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped - 5.4L and 6.8L gasoline engines only)
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
177
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul ON
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
To activate Tow/Haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
178
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss
of vehicle control.
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
179
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped - diesel engines only)
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
D (Drive) with Overdrive is the normal driving position for the best fuel
economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
180
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
D (Drive) without Overdrive
D (Drive) without Overdrive can be
activated by pressing the
transmission control switch (TCS)
on the end of the gearshift lever.
O/D
ON/OFF
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• The O/D OFF lamp will illuminate
O/D
in the instrument cluster.
OFF
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides additional engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Drive) with Overdrive or D (Drive) without Overdrive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
181
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
182
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in
reverse and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to 6
feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
183
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gearshift lever is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
An RSS control allows the driver to
turn the RSS on and off. To turn the
RSS off, the ignition must be ON,
and the gear selector in R
(Reverse). An indicator light on the
control will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator
light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failure
in the RSS. The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is
pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off or PTO, is often added to the
engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include a
wheel-lift for tow trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire service and
pumping fluids. PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the
powertrain, often while the vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there
is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the vehicle
that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving. The aftermarket PTO
system installer, having the most knowledge of the final application, is
responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection or
powertrain cooling is required, and alerting the user to the safe and
proper operation.
Your vehicle is qualified for use as a stationary power source, within
limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas, and through the Ford Truck Body Builders
Advisory Service.
Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of continuous
operation as a stationary power source, due to the potential for the
normal venting of fuel vapors. For stationary PTO operation of extended
duration (beyond 10 minutes), diesel engine is recommended. Further
consult your aftermarket PTO installer, since the duration of operation
limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of.
184
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
185
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
186
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
Motorhome customers in the U.S and Canada should contact
1–800–444–3311.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford or Mercury vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle
customers call 1–800–521–4140. Customers will be asked to submit their
original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer or by calling 1–800–FORD–CLUB.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
187
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
188
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Except for commercial stripped
chassis vehicles, this switch is
located in the front passenger’s
footwell, by the kick panel.
On commercial stripped chassis
vehicles, this switch is located on a
bracket above the brake pedal.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
189
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
15
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
190
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
10A
3
15A
4
5
15A
30A
6
10A
7
10A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Not used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
O/D cancel, IVD module, 4W ABS
Delayed accessory overhead
console, Audio
Courtesy lamps
Power locks without RKE or
sliding door
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
module
Multi-function switch, Turn signals
191
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
8
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
9
10
5A
20A
11
15A
12
15A
13
14
15
15A
5A
5A
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
30A
5A
—
—
10A
—
15A
23
20A
24
25
26
27
28
—
10A
20A
5A
—
192
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Radio capacitor(s), Ignition coils,
PCM (Powertrain Control Module)
relay
Wiper control module
Main light switch, Park lamps,
License lamp (external lamps),
Multi-function switch
(flash-to-pass), BSM
Multi-function switch (hazards),
Brake lamps, IVD relay
Back-up lamps, Auxiliary battery
relay (gasoline engine only)
Blend door actuator, A/C mode
Instrument cluster
Trailer battery charge relay,
Cluster, BSM
Power seats
Power mirrors
Not used
Not used
Restraints
Not used
Audio, Instrument cluster,
Courtesy lamp relay, Accessory
delay relay
Power locks w/RKE or sliding
door
Not used
Left headlamp (low beam)
Cigar lighter
Audio
Not used
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
29
30
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
15A
31
32
10A
20A
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
10A
—
—
5A
—
10A
10A
40
41
42
20A
30A
20A circuit
breaker
—
30A circuit
breaker
43
44
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Diagnostics
Headlamps (high beam indicator),
DRL
Right headlamp (low beam)
Power point #1 (instrument
panel)
Starter relay
Not used
Not used
Instrument illumination
Not used
Brake Shift Interlock
Trailer tow electric brake, Center
High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)
Power point (body B-pillar)
Modified vehicle
Power windows
Not used
Wiper/washer
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
193
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
2
3
—
15A*
4
5A*
5
6
7
15A*
20A
60A**
8
9
40A**
50A**
194
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Power Distribution Box
Description
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
diode
Auxiliary battery diode
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
module, A/C clutch
Heated PCV (4.6L and 6.8L
engines)
Horn relay
PCM —fuel injectors
Ignition switch, Delayed accessory
delay
Trailer tow battery charge relay
Modified vehicle power
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
10
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A**
11
60A**
12
13
14
15
16
17
40A**
60A**
20A**
50A**
30A**
40A**
50A**
18
60A**
19
20
50A**
60A**
21
22
30A**
60A**
10A*
23
20A*
24
20A*
25
26
27
—
20A*
10A*
Power Distribution Box
Description
Trailer tow electric brake
controller
4-Wheel Anti-lock Brake System
(4WABS)
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
I/P fuses 29, 34, 35, 40 and 41
Fuel pump relay
Auxiliary blower relay
Main light switch
ABS/IVD
Blower motor relay (blower
motor)
Engine compartment fuses 3, 5
and 26, 23 (diesel) Instrument
panel fuses 26 and 32, PCM start
relay
IDM relay (diesel engine only)
Auxiliary battery relay (gasoline
engine only), PDB fuses 8 and 24
PCM power relay, PDB fuse 27
I/P fuses 4, 5, 10, 11, 16, 17, 22
and 23, Circuit breaker 44
Alternator field (diesel engine
only)
PCM, VMV, HEGO, MAF, EGR,
(gasoline engine only)
Trailer tow running lamps and
back-up lamp relays
Not used
Trailer tow turn signals
PCM KAPWR, Canister vent
(gasoline engine only)
195
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
28
A
B
C
D
E
F
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
G
—
H
—
J
—
K
—
* Mini fuses ** Maxi fuses
Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Fuel pump relay
Horn relay
Trailer back-up lamps relay
Trailer running lamps relay
Trailer battery charge relay
IDM relay (diesel only), IVD
(gasoline only)
PCM relay
Blower motor relay
Accessory delay relay
Start relay
Relay modules
Instrument panel relay module
The instrument panel relay module is located behind the radio in the
center of the instrument panel. Have your authorized dealer service this
module, if required.
196
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The relays are coded as follows:
Relay location
1
2
3
4
Description
Interior lamps
Open
Open
Battery saver
Engine compartment relay module
The engine compartment relay module is located in one of two places
depending on which type of engine your vehicle is equipped with:
• Gasoline engine: driver side of the engine compartment above the
brake master cylinder.
• Diesel engine: passenger side of the engine compartment behind the
power distribution box.
Have your authorized dealer service this module, if required.
The relays are coded as follows:
Relay location
1
2
3
4
Description
PCM back-up lamp
A/C control
Trailer tow right turn
Trailer tow left turn
197
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System and should not be used.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If
the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
198
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
199
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Full-size Matching Spare Tire/Wheel Information
This spare tire/wheel will match the road tire/wheel. When driving with
the full size matching spare tire/wheel, do not exceed 70 mph
(113 km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if you
need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing your vehicle
1. Park on a level surface.
2. Activate the warning flashers.
3. Place the gearshift in P (Park).
4. Apply the parking brake and turn
the engine off.
Spare tire information
The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed under the rear of your vehicle
(except cutaway and stripped chassis models).
200
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the rear doors and remove
the thumb screw and anti-theft
bracket. If finger pressure will not
remove the thumb screw, use the
lug wrench to loosen the screw.
2. Remove the access plug under
the left door.
3. Remove the jack handle from the
right side compartment and insert
the tip of the jack handle through
the access hole and into the tube.
4. Turn the jack handle
counterclockwise until the cable is
slack and the tire can be slid from
under the vehicle.
5. Remove the retainer from the
spare tire.
To stow the cable retainer with the spare removed, turn the jack handle
clockwise until all slack is removed.
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close
to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
201
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
1. Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire you are changing.
On E-450 vehicles, the parking brake is on the transmission. Therefore,
the vehicle will not be prevented from moving when a rear wheel is
lifted, even if the parking brake is applied. Be sure to block both
directions of the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that is
being lifted.
2. Remove the spare tire and jack from the storage location.
• the jack is located in the rear
right-hand side of the cargo area.
3. Remove any wheel trim. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench
behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off.
4. Loosen the wheel nut by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut
wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do not remove the
wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground.
Replacing the tire
1. Assemble the jack handle sections together and lock into the jack. Use
the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle.
202
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the
engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for
changing the tire.
2. Position the jack to raise the front or rear wheel.
• Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
Rear axle jacking points - All
models except E-350 Dual Rear
Wheel (DRW) and E-450:
Rear axle jacking points - E-350
Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) and
E-450:
203
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Front axle jacking points:
Place the jack under the pin on the
front surface of the front axle.
Do not place the jack under or
on the steering linkage.
• Raise the jack until the wheel is
completely off the ground. (Turn
jack handle clockwise if your
vehicle is equipped with a
screw-type jack or pump the jack
if equipped with a hydraulic
jack.)
• Remove the lug nuts with the lug
nut wrench.
• Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, thread the lug nuts on the studs
with the beveled face toward the wheel.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, thread the two element swiveling
lug nuts on the studs with the flange facing toward the wheel.
3. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugly against the wheel.
4. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the following pattern
(Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for
the proper lug nut torque specification):
204
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Never use wheels or lug
nuts different than the
original equipment as this could
damage the wheel or mounting
system. This damage could allow
the wheels to come off while the
vehicle is being driven.
6. Install any wheel covers, ornaments or hub caps. Make sure they are
snapped in place.
7. Stow the jack, handle and lug wrench.
8. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
205
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km) after any wheel disturbance
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km), and again at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size and wheel
Wheel lug nut torque*
lug nut type
lb.ft.
N•m
9/16 x 18 conical lug
150
200
nut
9/16 x 18 two-piece
140
190
lug nut
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,
apply one drop of motor oil between
the flat washer and the nut. Do not
apply motor oil to the wheel nut
threads or the wheel stud threads.
206
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine;
if your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the 6.0L Power
Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for
the proper jump starting procedure.
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
207
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
208
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
209
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
210
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
211
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
212
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do
not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air dam and must be towed from the
front, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed by wheel lift or
flatbed equipment to prevent damage to the air dam.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
213
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty
repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FORD).
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
214
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
Away from home–motorhome service
If you own a motorhome built on a Ford Chassis and are away from
home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than
the authorized dealer could provide, after following the steps above,
contact the Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealer or service location to help you. In the United States
and Canada:
Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center
900 N. Lake Havasu Avenue
Lake Havasu City, AZ 86403
1-800-444-3311
Open 365/24/7
In order to help service your motorhome vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Motorhome
Customer Assistance Center:
• telephone number where you can be reached
• vehicle location (city and state)
• year and make of your vehicle
• date of vehicle purchase
• current odometer reading
• vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S.
only).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
215
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
216
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer
Claim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle
ownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon
receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
217
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
218
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
219
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
220
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
221
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is available
from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42,
which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
222
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with the sliding door
electrical contact switches. Paint sealant or other contaminants could
interfere with the proper operation of the power locks or radio
speakers. If necessary, clean the contacts with Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42) to remove any sealant. Do not use any abrasives on
the contact surfaces.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
223
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
224
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
225
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry white
cotton cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner
(ZC-38-A) on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11-A) [In
Canada use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101)] to the wiped
area and spread around evenly.
3. Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean, white, cotton cloth and
press the cloth onto the soiled area–allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
226
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11-A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
227
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A)
Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11-A)
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D)
Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Dusting Cloth Mitt (ZC-47)
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A)
Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
228
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
229
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
HOOD
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the auxiliary latch, located in
the center top of the grill, to the left to release the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod.
230
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine compartment component locations
Refer to the 6.0L and 6.4L Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations.
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
4. Air filter assembly
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Power distribution box
10. Battery
231
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
232
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between
the MIN and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil
level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
233
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• If the oil level is below the lower
hole or the MIN mark, add
enough oil to raise the level
within the lower and upper holes
or within the MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
234
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
235
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
236
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected, refer to Automatic Transmission Operation in the
Driving chapter.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
237
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
RN
LE
A
TU
D
RE
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
238
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
239
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an
equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS-M99B37-B6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, or DEX-COOL威 brand with the
factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product such as
DEX-COOL威 brand with your factory filled coolant can result in
degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
240
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on the
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
241
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
242
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The “CHECK GAGE” indicator
light will illuminate.
• The “CHECK GAGE” indicator light will flash when fail-safe cooling
mode has been activated.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
243
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
244
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
245
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
246
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
If the check fuel cap light
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
light
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light
or “check fuel
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
highway driving.
or “check fuel cap”
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light
light to turn on as well.
message on may cause the
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
247
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
248
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right
Fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1
gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The Service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon
indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
249
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles
(3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
250
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
251
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
252
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
Note: Vehicles over 8,500 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) will not have fuel
economy information printed on the EPA window sticker.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
indicator, charging system
Illumination of the Service engine soon
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
253
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Service
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
engine soon
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
soon
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the Service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
254
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If the Service engine soon
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the Service engine soon
indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the Service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not
If the Service engine soon
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the Service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
indicator stays on
ready for I/M testing; if the Service engine soon
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
255
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
FULL COLD
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20° – 80° F
(-7° – 25° C):
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows in
the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low, start the engine.
3. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
4. Turn the engine off.
For E-350 and E-450 vehicles with the Hydro-Boost Brake
System, do not press the brake pedal after the engine has been
turned off. Pressing the brake pedal after the engine has been turned
off will give a false power steering fluid level reading.
5. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range.
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the
dipstick back in the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type.
256
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
• E-150–E-350 Single Rear Wheel
• E-350–E-450 Dual Rear Wheel
The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the
performance of the system could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for
maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with
universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be
necessary.
257
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
258
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C).
ADD
COLD
HOT
DO NOT ADD
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30
km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
ADD
COLD
HOT
DO NOT ADD
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F [66°C-77°C]).
259
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT
ADD
COLD
HOT
IDLING IN PARK
DO NOT ADD
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
High fluid level
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT
ADD
COLD
HOT
IDLING IN PARK
DO NOT ADD
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
260
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT
ADD
COLD
HOT
IDLING IN PARK
DO NOT ADD
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Automatic transmission fluid filter
The Torqshift automatic
transmission is equipped with a
serviceable transmission fluid filter
located inside the transmission
bottom pan.
Refer to scheduled maintenance
information for service intervals for
automatic transmission fluid and
transmission filter.
For transmission filter maintenance,
see your authorized dealer.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
261
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Disconnect the fresh air inlet tube
from the radiator support.
2. Open the clamp that secures the
two halves of the air filter housing
together.
3. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
4. Remove the air filter element
from the housing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
6. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.
7. Connect the fresh air inlet tube to the radiator support.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
262
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component1
4.6L V8 engine
Air filter element
Battery- standard /
(auxiliary)
Fuel filter
Oil filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs
Torqshift automatic
transmission
internal bottom–pan
filter4
FA-1632
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
FG-872
FL-820-S
5.4L V8
engine
FA-1632
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
FG-872
FL-820-S
6.8L V10
engine
FA-1632
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
FG-872
FL-820-S
2
3
—
FT-175
FT-175
1
Refer to the 6.0L and 6.4L Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service
part numbers.
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and design
specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or equivalent
replacement part. The customer warranty may be void for any
damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not used.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
4
Also available with 6.0L and 6.4L Diesel engine/TorqShift transmission.
263
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
—
—
—
Door weatherstrips
Hinges, latches, Striker plates, fuel
filler door hinge, and seat tracks
Lock cylinders
264
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Engine coolant-diesel engine1
Engine coolant 6.8L engine with aux
rear heat
Engine coolant 6.8L engine
Engine coolant 5.4L engine with aux
rear heat
Engine coolant 5.4L engine
Engine coolant 4.6L engine with aux
rear heat
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Silicone Spray
Lubricant
Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Grease
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
Ford part name
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
XL-1 /
None
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A
Ford part number /
Ford specification
23.8 quarts
(22.6L)
26.0 quarts
(24.6L)
28.8 quarts
Motorcraft Premium
(27.2L)
Gold Engine Coolant
VC-7-B /
with bittering agent
WSS-M97B51-A1
30.8 quarts
1
(yellow-colored)
(29.1L)
30.4 quarts
(28.8L)
32.6 quarts
(30.8L)
Refer to the 6.0L and 6.4L Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Between MIN
and MAX on
reservoir
Brake fluid
Engine coolant 4.6L engine
Capacity
Item
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Maintenance and Specifications
Capacity
Ford part name
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Cooling system stop leak pellets
—
Motorcraft Cooling
VC-6 /
System Stop Leak
WSS-M99B37-B6
Pellets
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
Premium Synthetic
CXO-5W20- LSP12
Motor Oil (US)
Engine oil
6.0 quarts (5.7L) Blend
(Canada) /
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
WSS-M2C930-A with
Super Premium Motor
API Certification Mark
Oil (Canada)2
Refer to the 6.0L and 6.4L Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Engine oil-diesel engine
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Keep
in
FULL
Motorcraft MERCON威
XT-5-QM /
Power steering fluid
range on dipstick
V ATF
MERCON威 V
13.9 quarts
Motorcraft MERCON威
XT-5-QM /
Automatic transmission fluid (4R75E)
(13.1L)3
V ATF4
MERCON威 V
Automatic transmission fluid
18.8 quarts
Motorcraft MERCON威
XT-6-QSP /
TorqShift (5–speed)
(17.7L)3
SP ATF4
MERCON威 SP
Dana conventional and Limited Slip
axle fluid
5.9 pints
SAE 75W-140 Synthetic
XY-75W140-QL /
M60 (M248)
(2.8L)5,7
Rear Axle Lubricant6
WSL-M2C192-A
E-350 with 4.10 axle ratio
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
265
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
266
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Windshield washer fluid
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E250/E350
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
Dana conventional axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E-250/350
Dana conventional axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
Dana conventional axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
Item
4.2 quarts (4.0L)
8.3 pints (3.9L)7
6.6 pints (3.1L)7
5.9 pints (2.8L)7
8.3 pints (3.9L)7
6.6 pints (3.1L)7
5.9 pints
(2.8L)5,7
Capacity
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
SAE 80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle Lubricant
SAE 90 Hypoid Gear
Oil
Ford part name
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
XY–90–GL /
ESW-M2C105-E
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Maintenance and Specifications
35.0 gallons
(132.4L)
37.0 gallons
(140.0L)
37.0 gallons
(140.0L)8
37.0 gallons
(140.0L)8
55.0 gallons
(208.0L)
Fuel tank–all regular and extended
length vans and wagons
Fuel tank–138 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
Fuel tank–158 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
Fuel tank–176 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
Fuel tank–158 inch and 176 inch
wheelbase (E-Super Duty)
—
Ford part name
—
Ford part number /
Ford specification
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford
specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size, if equipped with an
in-tank cooler, if equipped with an oil to air cooler and if equipped with a remote filter assembly. The amount of
transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 V should only use MERCON威 V fluid or fluid that is specified dual
usage MERCON威/MERCON威 V. Refer to scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 SP should only use MERCON威 SP fluid. Use of a dual usage fluid in
an automatic transmission requiring MERCON威 SP may cause transmission damage. Refer to scheduled
maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause transmission damage.
5
Dana limited-slip axle (M60) requires 8 oz. (228 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford
specification EST-M2C118-A.
6
If your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant it is considered lubricated for life. These
lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly
has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in
water.
7
Fill Dana rear axles to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
8
Optional fuel tank 55.0 gallons (208.0L).
1
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
267
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
4.6L V8
engine
Cubic inches
281
Required fuel
87 octane
Firing order
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Ignition system Coil on plug
0.052–0.056
Spark plug gap inch
(1.32–1.42mm)
Compression
9.4:1
ratio
Engine*
5.4L V8
engine
330
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
0.052–0.056
inch
(1.32–1.42mm)
9.0:1
6.8L V10 engine
415
87 octane
1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
Coil on plug
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42mm)
9.0:1
*Refer to the 6.0L and 6.4L Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine information.
Engine drivebelt routing
• 4.6L V8 and 5.4L V8 Engines without A/C
268
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 4.6L V8 and 5.4L V8 Engines with A/C
• 6.8L V10 Engine
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Complete Ford built vehicles
The vehicle identification number is attached to your vehicle in the
following places:
• The top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side.
269
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• On the certification label. This
label is required by the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and is made of
special material. If it is tampered
with, it will be destroyed or a
destruction pattern will appear.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Certification label for incomplete vehicles
On completed derivations of incomplete vehicles, the certification label is
affixed at a location determined by a subsequent stage manufacturer of
the completed vehicle. In these cases the completed vehicle is
manufactured in two or more stages by two or more separate
manufacturers.
270
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description
Five-speed automatic TorqShift-diesel engine
with overdrive cancel
Four-speed automatic overdrive (4R75E)
Five-speed automatic TorqShift-gasoline
engine with Tow/Haul
Code
B
Q
T
271
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Running boards
Splash guards
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
272
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-Ease™ hands-free communication system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
273
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................52
AdvanceTrac ..............................168
Air cleaner filter ...............261–263
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................86
and child safety seats ..............88
description ................................86
disposal ......................................90
driver airbag ..............................88
indicator light ...........................90
operation ...................................88
passenger airbag .......................88
passenger deactivation
switch ........................................91
Ambulance packages ....................8
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................238
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................166
Anti-theft system ........................66
arming the system ....................67
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................19, 21, 25
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................175, 177, 180
fluid, adding ............................258
fluid, checking ........................258
fluid, refill capacities ..............264
fluid, specification ..................264
Auxiliary power point .................50
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........264
refill capacities ........................264
traction lok ..............................172
B
Battery .......................................236
274
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
acid, treating emergencies .....236
battery saver .............................34
jumping a disabled battery ....207
maintenance-free ....................236
replacement, specifications ...263
servicing ..................................236
Belt-Minder威 ...............................81
Booster seats ...............................97
Brakes ........................................165
anti-lock ...................................166
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................166
fluid, checking and adding ....257
fluid, refill capacities ..............264
fluid, specifications .................264
lubricant specifications ..........264
parking ....................................167
shift interlock ..........................174
Bulbs ............................................40
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....264
Cell phone use ..............................9
Changing a tire .........................198
Child safety restraints ................96
child safety belts ......................96
Child safety seats ......................100
in front seat ............................101
in rear seat ..............................101
tether anchorage hardware ...104
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................97
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............224
exterior ....................................227
instrument panel ....................226
interior .....................................226
plastic parts ............................225
Index
safety belts ..............................226
washing ....................................222
waxing .....................................223
wheels ......................................223
wiper blades ............................225
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......31–33
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .......................23, 27
AM/FM .......................................20
Compass, electronic ....................49
calibration .................................50
set zone adjustment .................49
Console
overhead ..............................47–48
Controls
power seat .................................70
Coolant
checking and adding ..............238
refill capacities ................242, 264
specifications ..........................264
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................54
Customer Assistance ................186
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................218
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................219
Getting roadside assistance ...186
Getting the service you
need .........................................214
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................220
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................218
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................35
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................258
engine oil .................................233
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................257
Driving under special
conditions
through water .........................185
E
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................207
Emergency Flashers .................188
Emission control system ..........253
Engine ........................................268
cleaning ...................................224
coolant .....................................238
diesel ...........................................7
fail-safe cooling .......................243
idle speed control ...................236
lubrication specifications .......264
refill capacities ........................264
service points ..........................231
starting after a collision .........188
Engine block heater .................164
Engine oil ..................................233
checking and adding ..............233
dipstick ....................................233
filter, specifications ........235, 263
recommendations ...................235
refill capacities ........................264
specifications ..........................264
Event data recording ....................6
275
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
Exhaust fumes ..........................163
F
Fail safe cooling ........................243
Fluid capacities .........................264
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................172
Fuel ............................................244
calculating fuel economy .......250
cap ...........................................247
capacity ...................................264
choosing the right fuel ...........248
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................252
detergent in fuel .....................249
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................244, 247, 250
filter, specifications ........244, 263
fuel pump shut-off switch .....188
improving fuel economy ........250
octane rating ...................248, 268
quality ......................................249
running out of fuel .................249
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................244
Fuses ..........................................190
G
Garage door opener ....................48
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............247
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................250
Gauges .........................................17
H
Hazard flashers .........................188
276
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Headlamps ...................................34
aiming ........................................37
bulb specifications ....................40
daytime running lights .............35
flash to pass ..............................35
high beam .................................35
replacing bulbs .........................41
turning on and off ....................34
Heating
heater only system .............31, 33
heating and air conditioning
system .......................................32
Hood ..........................................230
I
Ignition ...............................161, 268
Illuminated visor mirror .............47
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................100
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................255
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................226
cluster ........................................12
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................36
J
Jack ............................................198
positioning ...............................198
storage .....................................198
Jump-starting your vehicle ......207
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................57
Keys .............................................67
Index
positions of the ignition .........161
L
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................40
daytime running light ...............35
headlamps .................................34
headlamps, flash to pass ..........35
instrument panel, dimming .....36
interior lamps ...........................39
replacing bulbs .........................41
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................39
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........166
Load limits .................................144
Loading instructions .................150
Locks ............................................57
autolock .....................................57
doors ..........................................57
Lubricant specifications ...........264
Lug nuts ....................................206
Lumbar support, seats ...............70
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....263
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................193
Power door locks ........................57
Power mirrors .............................52
Power point .................................50
Power steering ..........................171
fluid, checking and adding ....256
fluid, refill capacity ................264
fluid, specifications .................264
Power Windows ...........................51
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................172
R
Mirrors .........................................52
fold away ...................................53
side view mirrors (power) .......52
Motorcraft parts ........227, 244, 263
Radio ................................19, 21, 25
Relays ................................190, 196
Remote entry system .................61
illuminated entry ......................65
locking/unlocking
doors ..............................57, 62–63
panic alarm ...............................63
replacement/additional
transmitters ...............................64
replacing the batteries .............63
Reverse sensing system ...........182
Roadside assistance ..................186
Roll stability control .................168
O
S
Octane rating ............................248
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................233
Safety Belt Maintenance ............85
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) .........76–80
Safety defects, reporting ..220–221
Safety restraints ....................76–80
M
P
Parking brake ............................167
277
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
Belt-Minder威 .............................81
extension assembly ..................85
for adults .............................77–79
for children .........................95–96
safety belt maintenance ...........85
warning light and chime ..........81
Safety seats for children ..........100
Seats ............................................69
child safety seats ....................100
front seats .................................69
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ....................................66–67
Servicing your vehicle ..............229
Setting the clock
AM/FM stereo ...........................20
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ..........23, 27
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........200
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................263, 268
Special notice ................................8
ambulance conversions ..............8
diesel-powered vehicles .............7
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................264
Speed control ..............................54
Stability system .........................168
Starting your vehicle ........161–163
jump starting ..........................207
Steering wheel
tilting .........................................47
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) ...........31, 33
Tilt steering wheel ......................47
278
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....132
Tires ...........................114–115, 198
alignment ................................124
care ..........................................120
changing ..................198, 200–202
checking the pressure ............119
inflating ...................................116
label .........................................131
replacing ..........................122, 202
rotating ....................................124
safety practices .......................123
sidewall information ...............126
snow tires and chains ............143
spare tire .........................198, 200
terminology .............................115
tire grades ...............................115
treadwear ........................114, 121
Towing .......................................150
recreational towing .................160
trailer towing ..........................150
wrecker ....................................213
Traction control ........................167
Traction-lok rear axle ...............172
Transmission .............................174
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....174
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................258
fluid, refill capacities ..............264
lubricant specifications ..........264
Turn signal ..................................39
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................269
Vehicle loading ..........................144
Ventilating your vehicle ...........164
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Index
Washer fluid ..............................232
Water, Driving through .............185
Windows
power .........................................51
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................46
checking and adding fluid .....232
replacing wiper blades ...........232
Wrecker towing .........................213
279
2008 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
280
Download PDF

advertising